blob: c64ef350a6c6c44a662839d3205bdf1185f47f40 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
Chandler Carruth2946cd72019-01-19 08:50:56 +00003// Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions.
4// See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information.
5// SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00006//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00007//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00008//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +00009// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000010//
11//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
12
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000013#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
14#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000015#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
22#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000023#include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
David Blaikie31b98d22018-06-04 21:23:21 +000029#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000030#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000031#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000032#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000033#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000034#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000035#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000036#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000037#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
39#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000040#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
43#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000044#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
45#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000046#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
47#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000048#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000049#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
50#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
51#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
52#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000053#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000054#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000055#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000056#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000057#include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000058#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
59#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
60#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000061#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000062#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000063#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +000064#include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000065#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000066#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000067#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000068#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000069#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000070#include <cassert>
71#include <climits>
72#include <cstddef>
73#include <cstdint>
74#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000075#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000076#include <set>
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000077#include <tuple>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000078#include <utility>
79#include <vector>
80
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000081using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000082using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000083
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000084#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
85
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000086// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
87// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
88// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
89// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000090static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
91 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
92 cl::desc(
93 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
94
95static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
96 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
97 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000098
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000099static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000100 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
101 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000102
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000103static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
104 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
105 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000106
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000107static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
108 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
109 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
110 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
111 "predicated store"));
112
113static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
114 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
115 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
116 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
117
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000118static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
119 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
120 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
121 "executed"));
122
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000123static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
124 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
125 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
126 "speculatively executed instructions"));
127
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000128STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000129STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
130 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
131STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
132 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
133STATISTIC(
134 NumLookupTablesHoles,
135 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000136STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000137STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
138 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000139STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000140
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000141namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000142
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000143// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
144// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
145// cases composing the case group.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000146using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
147 SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
148
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000149// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
150// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
151// switch for that PHI.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000152using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000153
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000154/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
155struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
156 ConstantInt *Value;
157 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000158
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000159 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000160 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
161
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000162 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
163 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
164 return Value < RHS.Value;
165 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000166
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000167 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
168};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000169
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000170class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000171 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000172 const DataLayout &DL;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000173 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000174 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +0000175 bool Resimplify;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000176
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000177 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000178 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000179 Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
180 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(Instruction *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000181 BasicBlock *Pred,
182 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000183 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000184 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000185
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000186 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000187 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000188 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
189 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000190 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000191 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000192 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000193 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000194 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
195 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000196
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +0000197 bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICmpInst *ICI,
198 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
199
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000200public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000201 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000202 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000203 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +0000204 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000205
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000206 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +0000207 bool simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB);
208
209 // Helper to set Resimplify and return change indication.
210 bool requestResimplify() {
211 Resimplify = true;
212 return true;
213 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000214};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000215
216} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000217
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000218/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000219/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000220static bool
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000221SafeToMergeTerminators(Instruction *SI1, Instruction *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000222 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000223 if (SI1 == SI2)
224 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000225
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000226 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
227 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
228 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
229 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
230 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000231
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000232 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
233 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000234 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
235 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
236 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000237 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
238 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000239 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
240 if (FailBlocks)
241 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
242 Fail = true;
243 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000244 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000245
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000246 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000247}
248
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000249/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
250/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
251/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000252static bool
253isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
254 Instruction *Cond,
255 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
256 if (SI1 == SI2)
257 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000258 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
259
260 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000261 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000262 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
263 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
264 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
265 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000266 if (!Ci2)
267 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000268 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
269 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
270 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
271 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
272 return false;
273
274 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
275 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000276 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000277 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
278 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
279 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000280 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
281 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000282 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000283 return false;
284 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
285 }
286 return true;
287}
288
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000289/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
290/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
291/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
292/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000293static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
294 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +0000295 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis())
296 PN.addIncoming(PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000297}
298
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000299/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
300/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
301/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000302/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000303static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000304 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000305 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000306 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000307 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000308}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000309
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000310/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
311/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000312/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
313/// which works well enough for us.
314///
315/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000316/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
317/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
318/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
319/// set and true is returned.
320///
321/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
322/// Select whose cost is 2.
323///
324/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
325/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
326/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000327static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +0000328 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000329 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000330 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
331 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000332 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
333 // so limit the recursion depth.
334 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
335 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
336 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
337 return false;
338
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000339 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000340 if (!I) {
341 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
342 // can be executed unconditionally.
343 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
344 if (C->canTrap())
345 return false;
346 return true;
347 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000348 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000349
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000350 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000351 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000352 if (PBB == BB)
353 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000354
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000355 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
356 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000357 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
358 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000359 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000360 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000361
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000362 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +0000363 if (AggressiveInsts.count(I))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000364 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000365
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000366 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
367 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
368 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000369 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000370 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000371
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000372 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000373
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000374 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
375 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
376 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
377 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
378 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
379 // enabled further IR optimizations.
380 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +0000381 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts.empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000382 return false;
383
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000384 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
385 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000386
387 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
388 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000389 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000390 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
391 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000392 return false;
393 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +0000394 AggressiveInsts.insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000395 return true;
396}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000397
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000398/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000399/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000400static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000401 // Normal constant int.
402 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000403 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000404 return CI;
405
406 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
407 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000408 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000409
410 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
411 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
412 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
413
414 // IntToPtr const int.
415 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
416 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
417 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
418 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
419 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
420 return CI;
421 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000422 return cast<ConstantInt>(
423 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000424 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000425 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000426}
427
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000428namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000429
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000430/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
431/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
432/// structure.
433/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
434/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
435/// representing the different cases for the switch.
436/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
437/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
438/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
439/// fail.
440struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000441 const DataLayout &DL;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000442
443 /// Value found for the switch comparison
444 Value *CompValue = nullptr;
445
446 /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
447 Value *Extra = nullptr;
448
449 /// Set of integers to match in switch
450 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
451
452 /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
453 unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000454
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000455 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000456 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000457 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000458 }
459
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000460 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000461 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000462 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000463
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000464private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000465 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
466 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
467 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000468 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
469 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000470 CompValue = NewVal;
471 return (CompValue != nullptr);
472 }
473
474 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
475 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
476 /// match depending on isEQ).
477 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
478 /// against is placed in CompValue.
479 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
480 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000481 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000482 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
483 ICmpInst *ICI;
484 ConstantInt *C;
485 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000486 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000487 return false;
488 }
489
490 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000491 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000492
493 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000494 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000495 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000496 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000497 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
498 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
499
500 /*
501 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
502 x : BITVECTOR(64);
503 y : BITVECTOR(64);
504 z : BITVECTOR(64);
505 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
506 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
507 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
508 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000509 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
510 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
511 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000512 */
513
514 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
515 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
516 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
517 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
518 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
519 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
520 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
521
522 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
523 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
524 //
525 // mask = (1 << z)
526 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
527 //
528 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
529 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
530
531 // Pattern match a special case:
532 /*
533 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
534 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
535 );
536 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000537 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000538 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
539 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000540 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000541 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000542 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543 return false;
544
545 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000546 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000547 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
548 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549 UsedICmps++;
550 return true;
551 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000552 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000553
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000554 // Pattern match a special case:
555 /*
556 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
557 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
558 );
559 */
560 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
561 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
562 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
563 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
564 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
565 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
566 return false;
567
568 Vals.push_back(C);
569 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
570 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
571 UsedICmps++;
572 return true;
573 }
574 }
575
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000576 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000577 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000578 return false;
579
580 UsedICmps++;
581 Vals.push_back(C);
582 return ICI->getOperand(0);
583 }
584
585 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000586 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
587 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000588
589 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
590 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
591 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000592 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
593 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000594 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
595 }
596
597 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
598 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
599 // x != 0 && x != 1.
600 if (!isEQ)
601 Span = Span.inverse();
602
603 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Craig Topper7e3e7af2017-05-07 22:22:11 +0000604 if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000605 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000606 }
607
608 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000609 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000610 return false;
611
612 // Add all values from the range to the set
613 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
614 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000615
616 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000617 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000618 }
619
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000620 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000621 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
622 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
623 /// vector.
624 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000625 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000626 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
627 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000628
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000629 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
630 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000631 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000632
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000633 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000634 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000635 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000636
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000637 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000638 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000639
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000640 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
641 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
642 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000643 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
644 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
645 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
646 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000647 continue;
648 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000649
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000650 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000651 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000652 // Match succeed, continue the loop
653 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000654 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000655
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000656 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
657 // comparison against the same value as the others.
658 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
659 if (!Extra) {
660 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000661 continue;
662 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000663 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
664 CompValue = nullptr;
665 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000666 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000667 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000668};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000669
670} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000671
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000672static void EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(Instruction *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000673 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000674 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
675 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
676 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
677 if (BI->isConditional())
678 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000679 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
680 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000681 }
682
683 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000684 if (Cond)
685 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000686}
687
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000688/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000689/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000690Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(Instruction *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000691 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000692 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
693 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
694 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Vedant Kumar4de31bb2018-11-19 19:54:27 +0000695 if (!SI->getParent()->hasNPredecessorsOrMore(128 / SI->getNumSuccessors()))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000696 CV = SI->getCondition();
697 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000698 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000699 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000700 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000701 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000702 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000703
704 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000705 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000706 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
707 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000708 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000709 CV = Ptr;
710 }
711 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000712 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000713}
714
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000715/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000716/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000717BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000718 Instruction *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000719 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000720 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000721 for (auto Case : SI->cases())
722 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
723 Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000724 return SI->getDefaultDest();
725 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000726
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000727 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000728 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000729 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000730 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
731 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000732 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000733}
734
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000735/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000736/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000737static void
738EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
739 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000740 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000741}
742
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000743/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000744static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
745 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000746 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
747
748 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
749 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
750 std::swap(V1, V2);
751
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000752 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000753 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000754 if (V1->size() == 1) {
755 // Just scan V2.
756 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
757 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
758 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
759 return true;
760 }
761
762 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
763 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
764 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
765 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
766 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
767 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
768 return true;
769 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
770 ++i1;
771 else
772 ++i2;
773 }
774 return false;
775}
776
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000777// Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
778// least one non-zero weight.
779static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
780 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
781 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
782 MDNode *N = nullptr;
783 if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
784 N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
785 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
786}
787
788// Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
789// exactly 2 weights.
790static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
791 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
792 assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
793 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
794 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
795 MDNode *N = nullptr;
796 if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
797 N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
798 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
799 I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
800}
801
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000802/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
803/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
804/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
805/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
806/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000807bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000808 Instruction *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000809 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000810 if (!PredVal)
811 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000812
813 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
814 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000815 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
816 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000817
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000818 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
819 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
820
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000821 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000822 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000823 BasicBlock *PredDef =
824 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
825 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000826
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000827 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000828 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000829 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000830 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000831
832 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
833 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
834 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
835 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
836 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
837 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000838 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000839 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000840
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000841 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
842 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
843 // uncond br.
844 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
845 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000846 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000847 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000848
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000849 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000850 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000851
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000852 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
853 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
854 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000855
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000856 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000857 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000858 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000859
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000860 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
861 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000862 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000863 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
864 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000865
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000866 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
867 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000868
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000869 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
870 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000871 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000872 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
873 if (HasWeight)
874 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
875 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000876 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000877 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
878 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000879 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
880 --i;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000881 if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000882 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000883 std::swap(Weights[i->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000884 Weights.pop_back();
885 }
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000886 i->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000887 SI->removeCase(i);
888 }
889 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000890 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000891 setBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000892
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000893 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000894 return true;
895 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000896
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000897 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
898 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000899 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000900 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000901 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
902 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000903 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000904 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000905 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
906 }
907 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000908
909 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
910 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000911 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000912 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
913 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
914 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
915 break;
916 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000917
918 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000919 if (!TheRealDest)
920 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000921
922 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
923 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000924 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
925 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
926 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000927 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000928 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000929
930 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000931 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000932 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000933
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000934 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
935 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
936 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000937
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000938 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(TI);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000939 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000940}
941
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000942namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000943
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000944/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
945/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
946/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
947struct ConstantIntOrdering {
948 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
949 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
950 }
951};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000952
953} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000954
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000955static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
956 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
957 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
958 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000959 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000960 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000961 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000962}
963
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000964static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000965 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000966 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000967 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000968 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
969
970 return false;
971}
972
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000973/// Get Weights of a given terminator, the default weight is at the front
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000974/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
975/// metadata.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +0000976static void GetBranchWeights(Instruction *TI,
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000977 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000978 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000979 assert(MD);
980 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000981 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000982 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000983 }
984
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000985 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
986 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
987 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000988 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000989 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
990 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
991 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
992 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000993 }
994}
995
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000996/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000997static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000998 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
999 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
1000 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
1001 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
1002 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +00001003 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001004}
1005
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001006/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
1007/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +00001008/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
1009/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00001010bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(Instruction *TI,
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001011 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001012 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001013 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001014 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
1015 bool Changed = false;
1016
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001017 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001018 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +00001019 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001020
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001021 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00001022 Instruction *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001023 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001024
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001025 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +00001026 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001027 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
1028 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
Benjamin Kramer46f5e2c2017-03-24 14:15:35 +00001029 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split"))
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001030 return false;
1031 }
1032 }
1033
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001034 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001035 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001036 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1037
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001038 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001039 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1040
1041 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1042 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1043 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001044 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001045
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001046 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1047 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001048 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1049 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1050
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001051 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001052 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001053 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001054 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1055 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1056 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001057 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1058 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1059 // successor's weights
1060 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001061
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001062 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001063 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001064 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001065 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001066 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1067 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1068 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001069 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001070
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001071 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1072 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1073 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001074 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001075 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1076 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1077 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1078 else {
1079 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1080 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001081
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001082 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1083 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001084 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1085 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001086 Weights.pop_back();
1087 }
1088
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001089 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001090 --i;
1091 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001092 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001093
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001094 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001095 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1096 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1097 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1098 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1099 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001100
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001101 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1102 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001103 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1104 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1105 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1106 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1107 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001108 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1109 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1110 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1111 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001112 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1113 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001114 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001115 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001116
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001117 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1118 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1119 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1120 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1121 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1122 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1123 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1124 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001125 } else {
1126 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1127 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1128 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001129 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1130 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001131 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1132 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1133 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001134
1135 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001136 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1137 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001138 Weights.pop_back();
1139 }
1140
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001141 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1142 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001143 --i;
1144 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001145 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001146
1147 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1148 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001149 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1150 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1151 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001152 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1153 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001154 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1155 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001156 PTIHandled.erase(
1157 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001158 }
1159
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001160 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1161 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001162 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001163 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001164 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1165 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001166 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001167 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001168 }
1169
1170 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1171 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1172 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001173 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1174 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001175
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001176 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001177 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001178 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001179 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001180 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001181 }
1182
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001183 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001184 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1185 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001186 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001187 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1188 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001189
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001190 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1191 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1192 FitWeights(Weights);
1193
1194 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1195
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00001196 setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001197 }
1198
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00001199 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001200
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001201 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1202 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1203 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001204 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001205 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1206 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001207 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001208 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001209 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001210 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1211 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001212 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001213 }
1214 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1215 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001216
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001217 Changed = true;
1218 }
1219 }
1220 return Changed;
1221}
1222
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001223// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1224// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1225// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001226static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1227 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001228 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001229 for (const PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1230 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1231 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001232 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001233 return false;
1234 }
1235 }
1236 }
1237 return true;
1238}
1239
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001240static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1241
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001242/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1243/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1244/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001245static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001246 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001247 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1248 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1249 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1250 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1251 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001252 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1253 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001254
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001255 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1256 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1257
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001258 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001259 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1260 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1261 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1262 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1263 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1264 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1265 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1266 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1267 }
Craig Topper784929d2019-02-08 20:48:56 +00001268 // FIXME: Can we define a safety predicate for CallBr?
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001269 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Craig Topper784929d2019-02-08 20:48:56 +00001270 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)) ||
1271 isa<CallBrInst>(I1))
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001272 return false;
1273
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001274 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001275
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001276 bool Changed = false;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001277 do {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001278 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1279 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00001280 if (I1->isTerminator())
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001281 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001282
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001283 // If we're going to hoist a call, make sure that the two instructions we're
1284 // commoning/hoisting are both marked with musttail, or neither of them is
1285 // marked as such. Otherwise, we might end up in a situation where we hoist
1286 // from a block where the terminator is a `ret` to a block where the terminator
1287 // is a `br`, and `musttail` calls expect to be followed by a return.
1288 auto *C1 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I1);
1289 auto *C2 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I2);
1290 if (C1 && C2)
1291 if (C1->isMustTailCall() != C2->isMustTailCall())
Davide Italiano86b79492017-12-31 16:54:03 +00001292 return Changed;
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001293
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001294 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1295 return Changed;
1296
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001297 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) {
1298 assert (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2));
1299 // The debug location is an integral part of a debug info intrinsic
1300 // and can't be separated from it or replaced. Instead of attempting
1301 // to merge locations, simply hoist both copies of the intrinsic.
1302 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1303 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1304 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1305 BB2->getInstList(), I2);
1306 Changed = true;
1307 } else {
1308 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1309 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1310 // the now redundant second instruction.
1311 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1312 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1313 if (!I2->use_empty())
1314 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1315 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
1316 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1317 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1318 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1319 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1320 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1321 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1322 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1323 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1324 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
Michael Kruse978ba612018-12-20 04:58:07 +00001325 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access,
1326 LLVMContext::MD_access_group};
Florian Hahn406f1ff2018-08-24 11:40:04 +00001327 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs, true);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001328
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001329 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1330 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
1331 I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001332
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001333 I2->eraseFromParent();
1334 Changed = true;
1335 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001336
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001337 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1338 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001339 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1340 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1341 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1342 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1343 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1344 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1345 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1346 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1347 }
1348 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
1349
1350 return true;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001351
1352HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001353 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
Craig Topper784929d2019-02-08 20:48:56 +00001354 // FIXME: Can we define a safety predicate for CallBr?
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001355 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001356 return Changed;
1357
Craig Topper784929d2019-02-08 20:48:56 +00001358 // TODO: callbr hoisting currently disabled pending further study.
1359 if (isa<CallBrInst>(I1))
1360 return Changed;
1361
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001362 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001363 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1364 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1365 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001366 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1367 continue;
1368
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001369 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1370 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001371 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, &PN) ||
1372 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, &PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001373 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001374
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001375 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001376 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001377 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001378 return Changed;
1379 }
1380 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001381
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001382 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001383 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001384 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001385 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001386 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1387 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001388 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001389 }
1390
Jeremy Morse9b4cfa52018-11-28 17:58:45 +00001391 // Ensure terminator gets a debug location, even an unknown one, in case
1392 // it involves inlinable calls.
1393 NT->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
Carlos Alberto Encisofa9cf892018-11-09 09:42:10 +00001394
Jeremy Morsef216da72019-01-14 12:13:12 +00001395 // PHIs created below will adopt NT's merged DebugLoc.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001396 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Jeremy Morse9b4cfa52018-11-28 17:58:45 +00001397
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001398 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1399 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1400 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1401 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001402 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001403 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001404 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1405 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1406 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001407 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1408 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001409
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001410 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1411 // that determines the right value.
1412 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001413 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001414 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1415 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1416 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001417
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001418 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001419 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1420 if (PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1421 PN.setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001422 }
1423 }
1424
1425 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001426 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1427 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001428
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00001429 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001430 return true;
1431}
1432
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001433// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1434// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1435// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1436// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1437// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1438static bool canSinkInstructions(
1439 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1440 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
Hans Wennborg21eb7712019-04-16 12:13:25 +00001441 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Each instruction must have
1442 // exactly zero or one use, and we check later that use is by a single, common
1443 // PHI instruction in the successor.
1444 bool HasUse = !Insts.front()->user_empty();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001445 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1446 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1447 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1448 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1449 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001450
1451 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1452 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1453 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
Craig Topper784929d2019-02-08 20:48:56 +00001454 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallBase>(I))
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001455 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1456 return false;
1457
Hans Wennborg21eb7712019-04-16 12:13:25 +00001458 // Each instruction must have zero or one use.
1459 if (HasUse && !I->hasOneUse())
1460 return false;
1461 if (!HasUse && !I->user_empty())
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001462 return false;
1463 }
1464
1465 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1466 for (auto *I : Insts)
1467 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1468 return false;
1469
Hans Wennborg21eb7712019-04-16 12:13:25 +00001470 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they have a
1471 // use, check that the only user is a PHI or in the same block as the
1472 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction we're
1473 // contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
1474 if (HasUse) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001475 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001476 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001477 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001478 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001479 return (PNUse &&
1480 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1481 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1482 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001483 }))
1484 return false;
1485 }
1486
Aditya Kumar24f6ad512017-03-16 14:09:18 +00001487 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1488 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1489 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1490 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1491 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1492 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1493 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1494 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1495 if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1496 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1497 }))
1498 return false;
1499 if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1500 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1501 }))
1502 return false;
1503
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001504 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1505 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1506 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1507 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001508
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001509 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001510 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1511 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001512 };
1513 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1514 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1515 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1516 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001517 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
Craig Topper784929d2019-02-08 20:48:56 +00001518 if (isa<CallBase>(I0) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001519 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1520 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001521 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001522 for (auto *I : Insts)
1523 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001524 }
1525 }
1526 return true;
1527}
1528
1529// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1530// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1531// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001532static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001533 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1534
1535 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1536 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1537 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001538 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1539 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1540 do {
1541 I = I->getPrevNode();
1542 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1543 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1544 Insts.push_back(I);
1545 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001546
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001547 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1548 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1549 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1550 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001551 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
Hans Wennborg21eb7712019-04-16 12:13:25 +00001552 if (!I0->user_empty()) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001553 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1554 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1555 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1556 return U == PNUse;
1557 }))
1558 return false;
1559 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001560
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001561 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1562 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001563 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1564 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1565 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1566 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1567 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1568 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1569 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1570 // small mess we may make.
1571 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1572 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1573 });
1574 if (!NeedPHI) {
1575 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1576 continue;
1577 }
1578
1579 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1580 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1581 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1582 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1583 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1584 for (auto *I : Insts)
1585 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1586 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1587 }
1588
1589 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1590 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1591 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1592 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1593 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1594
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001595 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001596 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001597 if (I != I0) {
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001598 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
1599 // of all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location
1600 // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
1601 // loop below.
1602 // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
1603 // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
1604 // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
1605 I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
Florian Hahn406f1ff2018-08-24 11:40:04 +00001606 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I, true);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001607 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1608 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001609
Hans Wennborg21eb7712019-04-16 12:13:25 +00001610 if (!I0->user_empty()) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001611 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1612 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1613 // instruction and nuke it.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001614 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1615 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1616 PN->eraseFromParent();
1617 }
1618
1619 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1620 for (auto *I : Insts)
1621 if (I != I0)
1622 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001623
1624 return true;
1625}
1626
1627namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001628
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001629 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1630 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1631 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1632 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1633 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1634 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1635 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1636 // ...
1637 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1638 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1639 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1640 bool Fail;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001641
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001642 public:
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001643 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001644 reset();
1645 }
1646
1647 void reset() {
1648 Fail = false;
1649 Insts.clear();
1650 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001651 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1652 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1653 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1654 if (!Inst) {
1655 // Block wasn't big enough.
1656 Fail = true;
1657 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001658 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001659 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001660 }
1661 }
1662
1663 bool isValid() const {
1664 return !Fail;
1665 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001666
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001667 void operator--() {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001668 if (Fail)
1669 return;
1670 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001671 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1672 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001673 // Already at beginning of block.
1674 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001675 Fail = true;
1676 return;
1677 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001678 }
1679 }
1680
1681 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1682 return Insts;
1683 }
1684 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001685
1686} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001687
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001688/// Check whether BB's predecessors end with unconditional branches. If it is
1689/// true, sink any common code from the predecessors to BB.
1690/// We also allow one predecessor to end with conditional branch (but no more
1691/// than one).
1692static bool SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BasicBlock *BB) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001693 // We support two situations:
1694 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1695 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1696 //
1697 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1698 // else-if patterns;
1699 //
1700 // if (a) f(1);
1701 // else if (b) f(2);
1702 //
1703 // produces:
1704 //
1705 // [if]
1706 // / \
1707 // [f(1)] [if]
1708 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001709 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001710 // | [f(2)]|
1711 // \ | /
1712 // [ end ]
1713 //
1714 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1715 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1716 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1717 //
1718 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1719 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1720 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1721 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1722 //
1723 // [if]
1724 // / \
1725 // [x(1)] [if]
1726 // | | \
1727 // | | \
1728 // | [x(2)] |
1729 // \ / |
1730 // [sink.split] |
1731 // \ /
1732 // [ end ]
1733 //
1734 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1735 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001736 for (auto *B : predecessors(BB)) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001737 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1738 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1739 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1740 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1741 Cond = T;
1742 else
1743 return false;
1744 }
1745 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001746 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001747
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001748 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001749 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1750 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1751 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1752 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1753 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1754 // PHIOperands.
1755 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1756 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1757 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001758 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001759 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1760 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001761 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0]
1762 << "\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001763 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1764 ++ScanIdx;
1765 --LRI;
1766 }
1767
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001768 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001769 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1770 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1771 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1772 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1773 ++NumPHIdValues;
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001774 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001775 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1776 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1777 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001778
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001779 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1780 };
1781
1782 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001783 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1784 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1785 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1786 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1787 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1788 LRI.reset();
1789 unsigned Idx = 0;
1790 bool Profitable = false;
1791 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1792 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1793 Profitable = true;
1794 break;
1795 }
1796 --LRI;
1797 ++Idx;
1798 }
1799 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001800 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001801
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001802 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001803 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1804 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001805 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, UnconditionalPreds, ".sink.split"))
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001806 // Edges couldn't be split.
1807 return false;
1808 Changed = true;
1809 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001810
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001811 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1812 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1813 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1814 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1815 // per sunk instruction).
1816 //
1817 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1818 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1819 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1820 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1821 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1822 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1823 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001824 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
1825 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
1826 << "\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001827
1828 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1829 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001830 LRI.reset();
1831 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001832 // Too many PHIs would be created.
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001833 LLVM_DEBUG(
1834 dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001835 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001836 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001837
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001838 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001839 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001840 NumSinkCommons++;
1841 Changed = true;
1842 }
1843 return Changed;
1844}
1845
Adrian Prantl5f8f34e42018-05-01 15:54:18 +00001846/// Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001847/// conditional block.
1848///
1849/// We are looking for code like the following:
1850/// BrBB:
1851/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1852/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1853/// ... // function).
1854/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1855/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1856/// ThenBB:
1857/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1858/// br label EndBB
1859/// EndBB:
1860/// ...
1861/// We are going to transform this into:
1862/// BrBB:
1863/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1864/// ... //
1865/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1866/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1867/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1868/// ...
1869///
1870/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1871/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001872static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1873 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001874 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1875 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001876 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001877
1878 // Volatile or atomic.
1879 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001880 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001881
1882 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1883
1884 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001885 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00001886 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(BrBB->instructionsWithoutDebug())) {
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001887 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1888 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001889 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001890
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001891 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001892 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001893 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001894
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001895 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1896 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1897 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1898 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1899 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001900 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001901 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001902 }
1903
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001904 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001905}
1906
Adrian Prantl5f8f34e42018-05-01 15:54:18 +00001907/// Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001908///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001909/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1910/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1911/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1912/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1913/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1914///
1915/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1916/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1917/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1918/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1919///
1920///
1921/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1922/// \code
1923/// BB:
1924/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1925/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1926/// ThenBB:
1927/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001928/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001929/// EndBB:
1930/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1931/// ...
1932/// \endcode
1933///
1934/// Into this IR:
1935/// \code
1936/// BB:
1937/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1938/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1939/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1940/// ...
1941/// \endcode
1942///
1943/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001944static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001945 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001946 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1947 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1948 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1949 return false;
1950
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001951 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1952 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1953
1954 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1955 // to swap the select operands later.
1956 bool Invert = false;
1957 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1958 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1959 Invert = true;
1960 }
1961 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1962
Craig Topper90c0a062018-10-01 22:56:11 +00001963 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within ThenBB when
1964 // they are candidates for sinking into ThenBB. Specifically:
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001965 // - They are defined in BB, and
1966 // - They have no side effects, and
Craig Topper90c0a062018-10-01 22:56:11 +00001967 // - All of their uses are in ThenBB.
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001968 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1969
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001970 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
1971
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001972 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001973 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1974 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001975 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001976 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001977 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001978 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001979 // Skip debug info.
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001980 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
1981 SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001982 continue;
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001983 }
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001984
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001985 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001986 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001987 ++SpeculationCost;
1988 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001989 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001990
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001991 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001992 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1993 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1994 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001995 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001996 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001997 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1998 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001999 return false;
2000
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002001 // Store the store speculation candidate.
2002 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
2003 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
2004
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002005 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002006 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002007 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002008 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002009 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002010 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002011 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
2012
2013 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002014 }
2015 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002016
Craig Topper90c0a062018-10-01 22:56:11 +00002017 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in ThenBB as costs for
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002018 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
2019 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002020 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2021 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2022 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002023 I != E; ++I)
Craig Topperd616d332018-10-01 23:09:52 +00002024 if (I->first->hasNUses(I->second)) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002025 ++SpeculationCost;
2026 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002027 return false;
2028 }
2029
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002030 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2031 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002032 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2033 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2034 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002035
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002036 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002037 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002038 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002039 continue;
2040
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002041 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002042 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, &PN) ||
2043 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, &PN))
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002044 return false;
2045
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002046 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002047 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2048 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2049 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002050 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2051
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002052 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2053 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002054 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002055 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2056 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002057 unsigned MaxCost =
2058 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002059 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002060 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002061
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002062 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2063 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2064 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002065 // constant expression.
2066 ++SpeculationCost;
2067 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002068 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002069 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002070
2071 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2072 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002073 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002074 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002075
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002076 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002077 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002078
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002079 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2080 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002081 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002082 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2083 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2084 if (Invert)
2085 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002086 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002087 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002088 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00002089 SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
2090 SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002091 }
2092
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002093 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2094 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002095 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002096 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2097
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002098 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002099 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2100 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002101
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002102 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002103 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002104 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2105 unsigned OrigI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2106 unsigned ThenI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2107 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2108 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValue(ThenI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002109
2110 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2111 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2112 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002113
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002114 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002115 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2116 // destinations were inverted.
2117 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002118 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002119 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002120 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002121 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002122 PN.setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2123 PN.setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002124 }
2125
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00002126 // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
2127 // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
2128 // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
2129 for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
2130 I->eraseFromParent();
2131
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002132 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002133 return true;
2134}
2135
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002136/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002137static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002138 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002139
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002140 for (Instruction &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002141 if (Size > 10)
2142 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002143 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002144
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002145 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002146 // live outside of the current basic block.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002147 for (User *U : I.users()) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002148 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002149 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2150 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002151 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002152
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002153 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2154 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002155
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002156 return true;
2157}
2158
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002159/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2160/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2161/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002162static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL,
2163 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002164 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2165 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002166 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2167 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002168 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2169 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002170
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002171 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2172 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002173 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002174 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002175 }
2176
2177 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002178 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2179 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002180
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002181 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002182 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002183 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2184 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2185 }))
2186 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002187
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002188 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2189 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002190 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002191 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002192 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2193 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002194
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002195 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2196 // branch to RealDest.
2197 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2198 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002199
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002200 if (RealDest == BB)
2201 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002202 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002203 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2204 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002205
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002206 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2207 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2208 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2209 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002210 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2211 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2212 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Jeremy Morse90ede5f2019-03-11 16:23:59 +00002213 BranchInst *CritEdgeBranch = BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
2214 CritEdgeBranch->setDebugLoc(BI->getDebugLoc());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002215
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002216 // Update PHI nodes.
2217 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002218
2219 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2220 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2221 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2222 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002223 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002224 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2225 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2226 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2227 continue;
2228 }
2229 // Clone the instruction.
2230 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002231 if (BBI->hasName())
2232 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002233
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002234 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002235 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2236 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002237 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2238 *i = PI->second;
2239 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002240
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002241 // Check for trivial simplification.
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002242 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002243 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2244 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2245 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Reid Kleckner96ab8722017-05-18 17:24:10 +00002246 N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002247 N = nullptr;
2248 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002249 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002250 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002251 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002252 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002253 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2254 if (N)
2255 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002256
2257 // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2258 if (auto *II = dyn_cast_or_null<IntrinsicInst>(N))
2259 if (II->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::assume)
2260 AC->registerAssumption(II);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002261 }
2262
2263 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2264 // to EdgeBB instead.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002265 Instruction *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002266 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2267 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2268 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2269 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2270 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002271
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002272 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00002273 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC) || true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002274 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002275
2276 return false;
2277}
2278
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002279/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2280/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002281static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2282 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002283 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2284 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2285 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2286 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2287 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2288 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002289 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00002290 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
2291 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
2292 return false;
2293
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002294 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2295 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002296 if (!IfCond ||
2297 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2298 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2299 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002300
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002301 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2302 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2303 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2304 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2305 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2306 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2307 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2308 if (NumPhis > 2)
2309 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002310
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002311 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2312 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2313 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002314 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002315 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2316 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002317 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2318 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002319
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002320 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2321 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002322 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002323 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002324 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002325 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002326 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002327
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +00002328 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002329 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Craig Topper029d1ef2018-10-04 23:40:31 +00002330 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002331 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002332 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002333 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002334
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002335 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002336 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2337 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002338 if (!PN)
2339 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002340
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002341 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2342 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2343 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2344 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2345 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2346 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2347 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002348
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002349 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2350 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2351 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2352 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002353 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002354 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2355 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2356 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002357 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002358 } else {
2359 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002360 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002361 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002362 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002363 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2364 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002365 return false;
2366 }
2367 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002368
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002369 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002370 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002371 } else {
2372 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002373 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002374 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002375 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002376 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2377 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002378 return false;
2379 }
2380 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002381
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002382 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond
2383 << " T: " << IfTrue->getName()
2384 << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002385
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002386 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2387 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002388 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002389 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002390
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002391 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2392 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Carlos Alberto Enciso9a24e1a2018-10-25 09:58:59 +00002393 if (IfBlock1)
2394 hoistAllInstructionsInto(DomBlock, InsertPt, IfBlock1);
2395 if (IfBlock2)
2396 hoistAllInstructionsInto(DomBlock, InsertPt, IfBlock2);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002397
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002398 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2399 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002400 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002401 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002402
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002403 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2404 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2405 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002406 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002407 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002408
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002409 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2410 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2411 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002412 Instruction *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002413 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2414 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002415 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002416 return true;
2417}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002418
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002419/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2420/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002421/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002422static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002423 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002424 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2425 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2426 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2427 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2428 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002429
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002430 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2431 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2432 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002433 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002434 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002435 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002436 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002437
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002438 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002439 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2440 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2441 // branch into a return.
2442 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2443 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2444 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002445 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002446 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002447 return true;
2448 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002449
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002450 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2451 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2452 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2453 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002454
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002455 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2456 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2457 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2458 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2459 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2460 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2461 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002462
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002463 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2464 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2465 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2466 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2467 // safe.
2468 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2469 if (TCV->canTrap())
2470 return false;
2471 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2472 if (FCV->canTrap())
2473 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002474
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002475 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2476 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2477 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2478 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002479
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002480 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2481 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002482 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002483 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002484 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2485 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2486 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2487 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002488 TrueValue =
2489 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002490 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002491 }
2492
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002493 Value *RI =
2494 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002495
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002496 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002497
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002498 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
2499 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI << "TRUEBLOCK: "
2500 << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002501
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002502 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002503
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002504 return true;
2505}
2506
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002507/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002508/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002509static bool tryCSEWithPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002510 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2511 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002512 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2513 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002514 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2515 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2516 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2517 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2518 return true;
2519 }
2520 }
2521 return false;
2522}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002523
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002524/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2525/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2526/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2527static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2528 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2529 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2530 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2531 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2532 bool PredHasWeights =
2533 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2534 bool SuccHasWeights =
2535 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2536 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2537 if (!PredHasWeights)
2538 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2539 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2540 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2541 return true;
2542 } else {
2543 return false;
2544 }
2545}
2546
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002547/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2548/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2549/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002550bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002551 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002552
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002553 const unsigned PredCount = pred_size(BB);
2554
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002555 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002556 if (BI->isConditional())
2557 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2558 else {
2559 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2560 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
Craig Topper36af40c2017-08-02 02:34:16 +00002561 // successor. If such pattern exists, check for CSE between BB and its
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002562 // predecessor.
2563 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2564 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2565 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2566 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2567 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002568 for (auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin(),
2569 E = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().end();
2570 I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002571 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002572 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2573 Cond = Curr;
2574 break;
2575 }
2576 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002577 if (!tryCSEWithPredecessor(Curr, PB))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002578 return false;
2579 }
2580 }
2581
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002582 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002583 return false;
2584 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002585
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002586 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2587 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002588 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002589
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002590 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002591 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002592
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002593 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002594 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2595 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002596
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002597 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002598 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002599
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002600 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2601 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2602 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2603 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002604 // number of the bonus instructions we'll need to create when cloning into
2605 // each predecessor does not exceed a certain threshold.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002606 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002607 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002608 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2609 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2610 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002611 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002612 return false;
2613 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2614 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2615 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2616 return false;
2617 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2618 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2619 // and Cond.
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002620
2621 // Account for the cost of duplicating this instruction into each
2622 // predecessor.
2623 NumBonusInsts += PredCount;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002624 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2625 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2626 return false;
2627 }
2628
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002629 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2630 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2631 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2632 if (CE->canTrap())
2633 return false;
2634 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2635 if (CE->canTrap())
2636 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002637
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002638 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002639 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002640 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002641 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2642 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002643
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002644 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2645 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002646 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002647
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002648 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2649 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2650 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002651 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002652 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002653 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002654 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2655 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002656 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002657
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002658 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002659 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002660 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002661
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002662 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002663 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002664 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002665 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002666 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002667 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2668 Opc = Instruction::And;
2669 InvertPredCond = true;
2670 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2671 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2672 InvertPredCond = true;
2673 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002674 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002675 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002676 } else {
2677 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2678 continue;
2679 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002680
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002681 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002682 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002683
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002684 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2685 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002686 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002687
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002688 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2689 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2690 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2691 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002692 NewCond =
2693 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002694 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002695
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002696 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002697 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002698 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002699
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002700 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002701 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002702 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2703 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2704 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002705 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002706 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002707 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Martin Storsjo22dcddf2018-08-30 08:06:50 +00002708 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2709 continue;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002710 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2711 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002712 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002713 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002714
2715 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2716 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2717 // only given the branch precondition.
2718 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2719 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002720 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002721
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002722 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2723 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002724 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002725 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002726
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002727 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2728 // two conditions together.
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002729 Instruction *CondInPred = Cond->clone();
2730 RemapInstruction(CondInPred, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002731 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002732 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), CondInPred);
2733 CondInPred->takeName(Cond);
2734 Cond->setName(CondInPred->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002735
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002736 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002737 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002738 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), CondInPred, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002739 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2740
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002741 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002742 bool HasWeights =
2743 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2744 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002745 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2746
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002747 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002748 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002749 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2750 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002751 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002752 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002753 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002754 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2755 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2756 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002757 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2758 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2759 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002760 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002761 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2762 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2763 }
2764 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002765 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002766 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2767 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002768 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002769 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002770 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2771 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2772 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2773 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002774 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2775 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002776 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2777 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2778 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002779 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2780 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2781 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2782
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002783 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2784 NewWeights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00002785 setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002786 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002787 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002788 } else {
2789 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2790 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002791 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002792 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002793 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002794 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002795 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2796 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2797 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2798 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002799 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2800 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2801 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002802 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, CondInPred,
2803 "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002804 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002805 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2806 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002807 } else {
2808 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2809 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2810 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002811 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002812 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), CondInPred, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002813 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002814 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2815 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2816 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2817 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002818 }
2819 }
2820 // Update PHI Node.
2821 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2822 MergedCond);
2823 }
2824 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2825 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00002826 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(PBI);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002827 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002828 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002829
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002830 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2831 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2832 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2833 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2834
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002835 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2836 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
Martin Storsjo22dcddf2018-08-30 08:06:50 +00002837
2838 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2839 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2840 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2841 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
2842
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002843 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002844 }
2845 return false;
2846}
2847
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002848// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2849// nullptr.
2850static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2851 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2852 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2853 if (!BB)
2854 continue;
2855 for (auto &I : *BB)
2856 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2857 if (S)
2858 // Multiple stores seen.
2859 return nullptr;
2860 else
2861 S = SI;
2862 }
2863 }
2864 return S;
2865}
2866
2867static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2868 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2869 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2870 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2871 //
2872 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2873 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2874 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2875 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2876 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2877 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2878 // one.
2879 //
2880 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2881 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2882 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2883 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2884 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002885
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002886 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2887 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2888 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2889 if (!AlternativeV)
2890 break;
2891
Vedant Kumar4de31bb2018-11-19 19:54:27 +00002892 assert(Succ->hasNPredecessors(2));
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002893 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2894 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2895 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2896 break;
2897 PHI = nullptr;
2898 }
2899 if (PHI)
2900 return PHI;
2901
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002902 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2903 if (!AlternativeV &&
2904 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2905 return V;
2906
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002907 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002908 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2909 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2910 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002911 PHI->addIncoming(
2912 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002913 return PHI;
2914}
2915
2916static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2917 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2918 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002919 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
2920 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002921 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2922 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2923 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2924 };
2925
2926 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2927 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2928 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2929 if (!BB)
2930 return true;
2931 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2932 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2933 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002934 unsigned N = 0;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002935 for (auto &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002936 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2937 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2938 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2939 ++N;
2940 // Free instructions.
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002941 else if (I.isTerminator() || IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002942 continue;
2943 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002944 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002945 }
Craig Topper12463772017-11-03 21:08:13 +00002946 // The store we want to merge is counted in N, so add 1 to make sure
2947 // we're counting the instructions that would be left.
2948 return N <= (PHINodeFoldingThreshold + 1);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002949 };
2950
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002951 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2952 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2953 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002954 return false;
2955
2956 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2957 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2958 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2959 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2960 // testing.
2961 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2962 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2963 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2964 return false;
2965
2966 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2967 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2968 return false;
2969
2970 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2971 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2972 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2973 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2974 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2975 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2976 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2977 //
2978 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2979 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2980 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2981 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2982 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2983 return false;
2984 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2985 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2986 return false;
2987 if (QTB)
2988 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2989 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2990 return false;
2991 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2992 I != E; ++I)
2993 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2994 return false;
2995
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00002996 // If PostBB has more than two predecessors, we need to split it so we can
2997 // sink the store.
2998 if (std::next(pred_begin(PostBB), 2) != pred_end(PostBB)) {
2999 // We know that QFB's only successor is PostBB. And QFB has a single
3000 // predecessor. If QTB exists, then its only successor is also PostBB.
3001 // If QTB does not exist, then QFB's only predecessor has a conditional
3002 // branch to QFB and PostBB.
3003 BasicBlock *TruePred = QTB ? QTB : QFB->getSinglePredecessor();
3004 BasicBlock *NewBB = SplitBlockPredecessors(PostBB, { QFB, TruePred},
3005 "condstore.split");
3006 if (!NewBB)
3007 return false;
3008 PostBB = NewBB;
3009 }
3010
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003011 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
3012 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
3013 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3014 ->getCondition();
3015 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3016 ->getCondition();
3017
3018 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
3019 PStore->getParent());
3020 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
3021 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
3022
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003023 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
3024
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003025 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
3026 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
3027
3028 if (InvertPCond)
3029 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
3030 if (InvertQCond)
3031 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
3032 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
3033
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003034 auto *T =
3035 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003036 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
3037 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3038 AAMDNodes AAMD;
3039 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
3040 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
3041 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003042 unsigned PAlignment = PStore->getAlignment();
3043 unsigned QAlignment = QStore->getAlignment();
3044 unsigned TypeAlignment =
3045 DL.getABITypeAlignment(SI->getValueOperand()->getType());
3046 unsigned MinAlignment;
3047 unsigned MaxAlignment;
3048 std::tie(MinAlignment, MaxAlignment) = std::minmax(PAlignment, QAlignment);
3049 // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
3050 // could use biggest one. In this case, though, we only know that one of the
3051 // stores executes. And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
3052 // store that doesn't execute.
3053 if (MinAlignment != 0) {
3054 // Choose the minimum of all non-zero alignments.
3055 SI->setAlignment(MinAlignment);
3056 } else if (MaxAlignment != 0) {
3057 // Choose the minimal alignment between the non-zero alignment and the ABI
3058 // default alignment for the type of the stored value.
3059 SI->setAlignment(std::min(MaxAlignment, TypeAlignment));
3060 } else {
3061 // If both alignments are zero, use ABI default alignment for the type of
3062 // the stored value.
3063 SI->setAlignment(TypeAlignment);
3064 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003065
3066 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3067 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003068
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003069 return true;
3070}
3071
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003072static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
3073 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003074 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3075 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3076 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3077 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3078 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3079 // PBI and QBI.
3080 //
3081 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3082 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3083 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3084 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3085 //
3086 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3087 //
3088 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3089 // / \ | \
3090 // PTB PFB | PFB
3091 // \ / | /
3092 // QBI QBI
3093 // / \ | \
3094 // QTB QFB | QFB
3095 // \ / | /
3096 // PostBB PostBB
3097 //
3098 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3099 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3100 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003101 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3102 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3103 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3104 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3105 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3106
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003107 // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3108 // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3109 if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3110 PostBB = QFB;
3111
3112 // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3113 if (!PostBB)
3114 return false;
3115
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003116 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3117 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3118 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3119 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3120 InvertPCond = true;
3121 }
3122 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3123 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3124 InvertQCond = true;
3125 }
3126
3127 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3128 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3129 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3130 PTB = nullptr;
3131 if (QTB == PostBB)
3132 QTB = nullptr;
3133
3134 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3135 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3136 // predecessor.
3137 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003138 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003139 };
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003140 if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003141 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3142 return false;
3143 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3144 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3145 return false;
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00003146 if (!QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003147 return false;
3148
3149 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3150 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003151 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003152 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3153 if (!BB)
3154 continue;
3155 for (auto &I : *BB)
3156 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3157 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3158 }
3159 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3160 if (!BB)
3161 continue;
3162 for (auto &I : *BB)
3163 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3164 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3165 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003166
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003167 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3168 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3169 // clear what it contains.
3170 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3171
3172 bool Changed = false;
3173 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3174 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003175 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DL);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003176 return Changed;
3177}
3178
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003179/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3180/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003181/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3182/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003183static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3184 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003185 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3186 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003187
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003188 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003189 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003190 // this conditional branch redundant.
3191 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3192 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3193 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3194 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3195 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3196 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3197 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003198 BI->setCondition(
3199 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3200 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003201 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003202
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003203 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3204 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3205 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3206 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003207 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003208 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3209 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3210 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003211 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3212 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3213 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003214 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003215 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003216 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3217 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003218 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3219 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003220 NewPN->addIncoming(
3221 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3222 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003223 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003224 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003225 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003226 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003227
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003228 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003229 return true;
3230 }
3231 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003232
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003233 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3234 if (CE->canTrap())
3235 return false;
3236
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003237 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3238 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3239 // merged store at the end.
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003240 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003241 return true;
3242
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003243 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003244 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003245 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003246
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003247 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003248 if (&*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin() != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003249 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003250
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003251 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003252 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3253 PBIOp = 0;
3254 BIOp = 0;
3255 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3256 PBIOp = 0;
3257 BIOp = 1;
3258 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3259 PBIOp = 1;
3260 BIOp = 0;
3261 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3262 PBIOp = 1;
3263 BIOp = 1;
3264 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003265 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003266 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003267
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003268 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3269 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3270 // keep getting unwound.
3271 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3272 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003273
3274 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003275 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3276 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003277
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003278 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3279 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3280 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3281
3282 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003283 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003284 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3285 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003286 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3287 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003288
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003289 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3290 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3291 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3292 if (CE->canTrap())
3293 return false;
3294
3295 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3296 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3297 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3298 if (CE->canTrap())
3299 return false;
3300 }
3301
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003302 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003303 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003304
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003305 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
3306 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003307
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003308 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3309 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3310 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3311 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3312 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3313 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3314 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3315 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3316 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3317 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003318 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3319 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003320 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3321 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003322 }
3323
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003324 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003325
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003326 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3327 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003328
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003329 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3330 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003331 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003332 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003333 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003334
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003335 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3336 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003337 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003338
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003339 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003340 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003341
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003342 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3343 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3344 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3345 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003346
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003347 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3348 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003349 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003350 bool HasWeights =
3351 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3352 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003353 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003354 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3355 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3356 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3357 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003358 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3359 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3360 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003361 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3362 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3363 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003364 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003365 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3366
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003367 setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003368 }
3369
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003370 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3371 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003372 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003373
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003374 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3375 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3376 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3377 // them agree.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003378 for (PHINode &PN : CommonDest->phis()) {
3379 Value *BIV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3380 unsigned PBBIdx = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3381 Value *PBIV = PN.getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003382 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3383 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003384 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3385 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003386 PN.setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003387 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3388 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3389 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3390 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003391 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003392 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3393 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3394 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3395 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3396 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3397 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3398 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3399 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3400
3401 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3402
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003403 setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003404 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003405 }
3406 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003407
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003408 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3409 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003410
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003411 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3412 // one fewer predecessor.
3413 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003414}
3415
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003416// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3417// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003418// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3419// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3420// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003421static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(Instruction *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003422 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3423 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003424 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003425 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3426 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3427 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3428 // successor.
3429 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003430 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003431
3432 // Then remove the rest.
Chandler Carruth96fc1de2018-08-26 08:41:15 +00003433 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(OldTerm)) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003434 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3435 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003436 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003437 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003438 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003439 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003440 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
Max Kazantsev20b91892019-02-12 07:09:29 +00003441 /*KeepOneInputPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003442 }
3443
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003444 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3445 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3446
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003447 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003448 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003449 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3450 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3451 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003452 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003453 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003454 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3455 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003456 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3457 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003458 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003459 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003460 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3461 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3462 // terminator must be unreachable.
3463 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3464 } else {
3465 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3466 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3467 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003468 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003469 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003470 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003471 else
3472 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003473 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003474 }
3475
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003476 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(OldTerm);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003477 return true;
3478}
3479
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003480// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003481// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3482// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3483// unconditional otherwise.
3484static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3485 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3486 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3487 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3488 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3489 return false;
3490
3491 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3492 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003493 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
3494 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003495
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003496 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3497 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3498 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3499 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3500 if (HasWeights) {
3501 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3502 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003503 TrueWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003504 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003505 FalseWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003506 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003507 }
3508 }
3509
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003510 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003511 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3512 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003513}
3514
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003515// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003516// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3517// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3518// with
3519// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3520static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3521 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3522 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3523 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3524 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3525 return false;
3526
3527 // Extract the actual blocks.
3528 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3529 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3530
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003531 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003532 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3533 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003534}
3535
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003536/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3537/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003538/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3539/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3540/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3541/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3542/// like:
3543///
3544/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3545/// DEFAULT:
3546/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3547/// br label %end
3548/// end:
3549/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003550///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003551/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3552/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00003553bool SimplifyCFGOpt::tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
3554 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003555 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003556
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003557 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3558 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003559 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3560 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003561
3562 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3563 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003564
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003565 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3566 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3567 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3568 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003569 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3570 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003571
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003572 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3573 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3574 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003575
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003576 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3577 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3578 // away.
3579 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3580 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3581 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3582 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003583
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00003584 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003585 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003586 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3587 }
3588 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00003589 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003590 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003591
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003592 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3593 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3594 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003595 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003596 Value *V;
3597 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3598 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3599 else
3600 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003601
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003602 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3603 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3604 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00003605 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003606 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003607
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003608 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3609 // the block.
3610 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003611 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003612 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003613 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3614 return false;
3615
3616 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3617 // true in the PHI.
3618 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003619 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003620
3621 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3622 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3623
3624 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3625 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3626 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3627 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3628
3629 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3630 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003631 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3632 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003633 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3634 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3635 if (HasWeights) {
3636 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3637 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3638 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003639 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003640 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3641
3642 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003643 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003644 }
3645 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003646 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003647
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003648 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003649 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3650 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3651 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003652 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3653 return true;
3654}
3655
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003656/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003657/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3658/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003659static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3660 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003661 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003662 if (!Cond)
3663 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003664
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003665 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3666 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3667 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003668
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003669 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003670 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3671 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003672 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003673 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3674 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3675 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003676
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003677 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003678 if (!CompVal)
3679 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003680
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003681 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3682 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3683 return false;
3684
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003685 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3686
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003687 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3688 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3689 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3690 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003691
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003692 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003693 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003694 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3695 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003696
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003697 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3698 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3699
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003700 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3701 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003702 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3703 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3704 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003705
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003706 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003707
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003708 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
3709 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3710 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003711
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003712 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3713 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3714 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3715 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003716 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3717 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003718 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003719 Instruction *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003720 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3721
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003722 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003723 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003724 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003725 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003726
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003727 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003728
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003729 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3730 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003731 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003732
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003733 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
3734 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003735 BB = NewBB;
3736 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003737
3738 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003739 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3740 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003741 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3742 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003743 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003744
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003745 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003746 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003747
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003748 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3749 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3750 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003751
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003752 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3753 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3754 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003755 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003756 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3757 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003758 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003759 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3760 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003761
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003762 // Erase the old branch instruction.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00003763 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003764
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003765 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003766 return true;
3767}
3768
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003769bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003770 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3771 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3772 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3773 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3774 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3775 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003776
3777 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003778}
3779
3780// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3781bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3782 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3783
3784 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3785 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3786 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003787 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003788 while (++I != E)
3789 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3790 return false;
3791
Mandeep Singh Grang799a2ed2017-04-24 19:20:45 +00003792 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003793 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3794
3795 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003796 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3797 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003798 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3799 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3800
3801 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3802 // it has other dependents.
3803 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3804 continue;
3805
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003806 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003807 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3808 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3809 continue;
3810
3811 bool isTrivial = true;
3812
3813 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3814 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3815 while (++I != E)
3816 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3817 isTrivial = false;
3818 break;
3819 }
3820
3821 if (isTrivial)
3822 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3823 }
3824
3825 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003826 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3827 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003828
3829 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3830 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3831 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3832 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3833 // to remove them all.
3834 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3835 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3836
3837 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3838 PI != PE;) {
3839 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3840 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3841 }
3842
3843 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3844 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3845 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3846 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3847 // predecessors.
3848 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3849 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3850 }
3851
3852 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3853 if (pred_empty(BB))
3854 BB->eraseFromParent();
3855
3856 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3857}
3858
3859// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3860bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003861 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3862 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003863 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3864 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003865
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003866 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3867 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003868 while (++I != E)
3869 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3870 return false;
3871
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003872 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003873 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3874 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3875 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003876 }
3877
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003878 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003879 if (LoopHeaders)
3880 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00003881 BB->eraseFromParent();
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003882 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003883}
3884
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003885static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003886 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3887 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3888 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3889 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3890 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3891 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3892 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3893 // simplified.
3894 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003895 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3896 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003897 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3898 return false;
3899
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003900 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3901 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3902 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3903 return false;
3904
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003905 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003906 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003907 while (++I != E) {
3908 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3909 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003910 return false;
3911
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003912 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3913 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3914 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3915 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
Shiva Chen2c864552018-05-09 02:40:45 +00003916 case Intrinsic::dbg_label:
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003917 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3918 break;
3919 default:
3920 return false;
3921 }
3922 }
3923
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003924 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3925 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003926 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003927 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003928
3929 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3930 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3931 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3932 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3933 // are both EH pads).
3934 if (UnwindDest) {
3935 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3936 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003937 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003938 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003939 I != IE; ++I) {
3940 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003941
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003942 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003943 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003944 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003945 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3946 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3947 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3948 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3949 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3950 // pad being removed.
3951 //
3952 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3953 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3954 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3955 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3956 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3957 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3958
3959 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3960 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3961
3962 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3963 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3964 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3965 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003966 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003967 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003968 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3969 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3970 }
3971 } else {
3972 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3973 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3974 // predecessors with this value.
3975 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3976 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3977 }
3978 }
3979 }
3980
3981 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003982 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003983 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3984 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003985 I != IE;) {
3986 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3987 // being moved to another block.
3988 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3989 if (PN->use_empty())
3990 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3991 // when we erase BB below.
3992 continue;
3993
3994 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3995 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3996 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3997 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3998 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3999 if (pred != BB)
4000 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
4001 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
4002 }
4003 }
4004
4005 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
4006 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
4007 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004008 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004009 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004010 } else {
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004011 Instruction *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004012 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004013 }
4014 }
4015
4016 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
4017 BB->eraseFromParent();
4018 return true;
4019}
4020
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004021// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
4022static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
4023 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
4024 // with.
4025 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
4026 if (!UnwindDest)
4027 return false;
4028
4029 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
4030 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
4031 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
4032 return false;
4033
4034 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
4035 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
4036 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
4037 return false;
4038
4039 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
4040 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
4041 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
4042 // funclet bundle operands.
4043 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
4044 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
4045 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
4046 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
4047 // destination.
4048 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
4049 RI->eraseFromParent();
4050
4051 return true;
4052}
4053
4054bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00004055 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4056 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4057 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4058 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4059 return false;
4060
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004061 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004062 return true;
4063
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004064 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004065 return true;
4066
4067 return false;
4068}
4069
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004070bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004071 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004072 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4073 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004074
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004075 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004076 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4077 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004078 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4079 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004080 Instruction *PTI = P->getTerminator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004081 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4082 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4083 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4084 else
4085 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4086 }
4087 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004088
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004089 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004090 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004091 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4092 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004093 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
4094 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004095 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004096 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004097
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004098 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004099 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004100 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004101 if (LoopHeaders)
4102 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00004103 BB->eraseFromParent();
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004104 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004105
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004106 return true;
4107 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004108
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004109 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4110 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4111 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4112 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4113 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004114
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004115 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4116 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4117 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004118 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004119 return true;
4120 }
4121 return false;
4122}
4123
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004124bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4125 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004126
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004127 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004128
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004129 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4130 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004131 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4132 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004133 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004134 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4135 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4136 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004137 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4138 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004139
4140 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004141 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004142 if (SI->isVolatile())
4143 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004144 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004145 if (LI->isVolatile())
4146 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004147 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004148 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4149 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004150 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004151 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4152 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004153 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4154 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4155 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4156 // default.
4157 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4158 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4159 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4160 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004161 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4162 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004163 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004164 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004165 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4166 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4167 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4168 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004169 }
4170
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004171 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4172 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4173 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004174 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004175 Changed = true;
4176 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004177
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004178 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4179 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004180 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4181 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004182
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004183 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004184 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004185 Instruction *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004186 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004187 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004188 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4189 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4190 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4191 TI->eraseFromParent();
4192 Changed = true;
4193 }
4194 } else {
4195 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004196 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004197 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004198 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004199 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004200 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004201 Changed = true;
4202 }
4203 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004204 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004205 for (auto i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004206 if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004207 ++i;
4208 continue;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004209 }
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004210 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4211 i = SI->removeCase(i);
4212 e = SI->case_end();
4213 Changed = true;
4214 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004215 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4216 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4217 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4218 Changed = true;
4219 }
4220 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4221 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4222 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4223 Changed = true;
4224 continue;
4225 }
4226
4227 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4228 E = CSI->handler_end();
4229 I != E; ++I) {
4230 if (*I == BB) {
4231 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4232 --I;
4233 --E;
4234 Changed = true;
4235 }
4236 }
4237 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4238 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4239 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4240 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4241 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4242 } else {
4243 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4244 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4245 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4246 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4247 }
4248 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4249 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4250 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4251 Changed = true;
4252 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004253 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004254 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4255 TI->eraseFromParent();
4256 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004257 }
4258 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004259
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004260 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004261 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004262 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004263 if (LoopHeaders)
4264 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00004265 BB->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004266 return true;
4267 }
4268
4269 return Changed;
4270}
4271
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004272static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4273 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4274
4275 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4276 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4277 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4278 return false;
4279 }
4280 return true;
4281}
4282
4283/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4284/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004285static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004286 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004287
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004288 bool HasDefault =
4289 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004290
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004291 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4292 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4293 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004294 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4295 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004296
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004297 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4298 BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004299 if (!DestA)
4300 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004301 if (Dest == DestA) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004302 CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004303 continue;
4304 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004305 if (!DestB)
4306 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004307 if (Dest == DestB) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004308 CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004309 continue;
4310 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004311 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004312 }
4313
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004314 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4315 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004316 assert(DestA != DestB);
4317 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4318 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4319 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4320
4321 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4322 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4323 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4324 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4325 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4326 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4327 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4328 OtherDest = DestB;
4329 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4330 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4331 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4332 OtherDest = DestA;
4333 } else
4334 return false;
4335
4336 // Start building the compare and branch.
4337
4338 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004339 Constant *NumCases =
4340 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004341
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004342 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4343 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004344 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4345
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004346 Value *Cmp;
4347 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004348 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004349 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4350 else
4351 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004352 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004353
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004354 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004355 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4356 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004357 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4358 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004359 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4360 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4361 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4362 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4363 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4364 else
4365 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4366 }
4367 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4368 TrueWeight /= 2;
4369 FalseWeight /= 2;
4370 }
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004371 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004372 }
4373 }
4374
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004375 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4376 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4377 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004378 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4379 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004380 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004381 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4382 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004383 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4384 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004385 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4386 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004387 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4388 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4389 }
4390
4391 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004392 SI->eraseFromParent();
4393
4394 return true;
4395}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004396
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004397/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004398/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004399static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004400 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004401 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004402 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Craig Topper8205a1a2017-05-24 16:53:07 +00004403 KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004404
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004405 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4406 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4407 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004408 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004409 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4410
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004411 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004412 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004413 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004414 const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004415 if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004416 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004417 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004418 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal
4419 << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004420 }
4421 }
4422
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004423 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4424 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004425 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4426 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004427 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004428 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4429 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004430 Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004431 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004432 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004433 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004434 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004435 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004436 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4437 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004438 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4439 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004440 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4441 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004442 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(OldTI);
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004443 return true;
4444 }
4445
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004446 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4447 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4448 if (HasWeight) {
4449 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4450 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4451 }
4452
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004453 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004454 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004455 SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
4456 assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004457 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004458 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004459 std::swap(Weights[CaseI->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004460 Weights.pop_back();
4461 }
4462
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004463 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004464 CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4465 SI->removeCase(CaseI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004466 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004467 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004468 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004469 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004470 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004471
4472 return !DeadCases.empty();
4473}
4474
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004475/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4476/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004477/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4478/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4479/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4480static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004481 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004482 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004483 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004484 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004485 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004486
4487 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4488 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004489 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004490
4491 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4492
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004493 for (PHINode &PHI : Succ->phis()) {
4494 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004495 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4496
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004497 Value *InValue = PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004498 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4499 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004500
4501 *PhiIndex = Idx;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004502 return &PHI;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004503 }
4504
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004505 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004506}
4507
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004508/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4509/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004510/// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004511static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004512 using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
4513
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004514 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004515 BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
4516 bool Changed = false;
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004517 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004518 ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
4519 BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004520
4521 // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
4522 // value rather than the switch condition variable:
4523 // switchbb:
4524 // switch i32 %x, label %default [
4525 // i32 17, label %succ
4526 // ...
4527 // succ:
4528 // %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
4529 // -->
4530 // %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
4531
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004532 for (PHINode &Phi : CaseDest->phis()) {
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004533 // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
4534 // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
4535 // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
4536 // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
4537 // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004538 int SwitchBBIdx = Phi.getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
4539 if (Phi.getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
4540 count(Phi.blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
4541 Phi.setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004542 Changed = true;
4543 }
4544 }
4545
4546 // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004547 int PhiIdx;
4548 if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
4549 ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004550 }
4551
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004552 for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
4553 PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
4554 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004555 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4556 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004557
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004558 for (int Index : Indexes)
4559 Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004560 Changed = true;
4561 }
4562
4563 return Changed;
4564}
4565
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004566/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004567/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004568static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004569 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4570 return false;
4571 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4572 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004573
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004574 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4575 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4576 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4577 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004578
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004579 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004580 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4581 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004582 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4583 return false;
4584 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004585
4586 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4587 return false;
4588
4589 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004590}
4591
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004592/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004593/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004594static Constant *
4595LookupConstant(Value *V,
4596 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004597 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4598 return C;
4599 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4600}
4601
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004602/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004603/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4604/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004605/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004606static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004607ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4608 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004609 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004610 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4611 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004612 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004613 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4614 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4615 if (A->isNullValue())
4616 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004617 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004618 }
4619
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004620 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4621 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4622 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4623 COps.push_back(A);
4624 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004625 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004626 }
4627
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004628 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004629 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4630 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004631 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004632
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004633 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004634}
4635
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004636/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004637/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004638/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004639/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004640static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004641GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004642 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004643 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004644 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004645 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4646 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4647
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004648 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4649 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004650 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004651 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004652 for (Instruction &I :CaseDest->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004653 if (I.isTerminator()) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004654 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004655 if (I.getNumSuccessors() != 1 || I.isExceptionalTerminator())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004656 return false;
4657 Pred = CaseDest;
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00004658 CaseDest = I.getSuccessor(0);
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004659 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004660 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004661
4662 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4663 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4664 // no longer dominate all its uses.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004665 for (auto &Use : I.uses()) {
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004666 User *User = Use.getUser();
4667 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4668 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4669 continue;
4670 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4671 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4672 continue;
4673 return false;
4674 }
4675
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004676 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004677 } else {
4678 break;
4679 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004680 }
4681
4682 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4683 if (!*CommonDest)
4684 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4685 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4686 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4687 return false;
4688
4689 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004690 for (PHINode &PHI : (*CommonDest)->phis()) {
4691 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004692 if (Idx == -1)
4693 continue;
4694
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004695 Constant *ConstVal =
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004696 LookupConstant(PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004697 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004698 return false;
4699
4700 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004701 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004702 return false;
4703
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004704 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(&PHI, ConstVal));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004705 }
4706
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004707 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004708}
4709
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004710// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004711// Result. Returns the updated number of cases that generate this result.
4712static uintptr_t MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
4713 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4714 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004715 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4716 if (I.first == Result) {
4717 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004718 return I.second.size();
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004719 }
4720 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004721 UniqueResults.push_back(
4722 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004723 return 1;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004724}
4725
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004726// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004727// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4728// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4729// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004730static bool
4731InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI, BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4732 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4733 Constant *&DefaultResult, const DataLayout &DL,
4734 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
4735 uintptr_t MaxUniqueResults, uintptr_t MaxCasesPerResult) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004736 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4737 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4738
4739 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4740 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4741 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004742 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004743 return false;
4744
Marcello Maggioniddccd502018-01-11 02:06:28 +00004745 // Only one value per case is permitted.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004746 if (Results.size() > 1)
4747 return false;
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004748
4749 // Add the case->result mapping to UniqueResults.
4750 const uintptr_t NumCasesForResult =
4751 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4752
4753 // Early out if there are too many cases for this result.
4754 if (NumCasesForResult > MaxCasesPerResult)
4755 return false;
4756
4757 // Early out if there are too many unique results.
4758 if (UniqueResults.size() > MaxUniqueResults)
4759 return false;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004760
4761 // Check the PHI consistency.
4762 if (!PHI)
4763 PHI = Results[0].first;
4764 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4765 return false;
4766 }
4767 // Find the default result value.
4768 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4769 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4770 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004771 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004772 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4773 // is unreachable.
4774 DefaultResult =
4775 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4776 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004777 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004778 return false;
4779
4780 return true;
4781}
4782
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004783// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4784// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004785// Example:
4786// switch (a) {
4787// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4788// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4789// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4790// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4791// default:
4792// return 4;
4793// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004794static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4795 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4796 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004797 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004798 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004799 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4800 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4801 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4802 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4803 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4804 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4805
4806 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4807 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4808 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4809 Value *const ValueCompare =
4810 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4811 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4812 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4813 }
4814 Value *const ValueCompare =
4815 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004816 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4817 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004818 }
4819
4820 return nullptr;
4821}
4822
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004823// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4824// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004825static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4826 Value *SelectValue,
4827 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4828 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4829 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4830 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4831 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4832
4833 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4834
4835 // Remove the switch.
4836 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4837 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4838
4839 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4840 continue;
4841 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4842 }
4843 SI->eraseFromParent();
4844}
4845
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004846/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004847/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4848/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004849static bool switchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4850 const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004851 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004852 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4853 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4854 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4855 Constant *DefaultResult;
4856 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4857 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004858 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004859 DL, TTI, 2, 1))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004860 return false;
4861 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4862 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4863 return false;
4864 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4865
4866 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004867 Value *SelectValue =
4868 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004869 if (SelectValue) {
4870 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4871 return true;
4872 }
4873 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4874 return false;
4875}
4876
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004877namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004878
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004879/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4880class SwitchLookupTable {
4881public:
4882 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4883 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4884 SwitchLookupTable(
4885 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4886 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004887 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004888
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004889 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4890 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4891 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004892
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004893 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4894 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4895 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4896 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004897
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004898private:
4899 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4900 // different ways.
4901 enum {
4902 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4903 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4904 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004905
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004906 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4907 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4908 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4909 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004910
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004911 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4912 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4913 // shift and mask operations.
4914 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004915
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004916 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4917 // instructions from the table.
4918 ArrayKind
4919 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004920
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004921 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004922 Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004923
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004924 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004925 ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
4926 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004927
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004928 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004929 ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
4930 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004931
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004932 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004933 GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004934};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004935
4936} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004937
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004938SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4939 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4940 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004941 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004942 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4943 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004944
4945 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004946 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004947
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004948 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4949
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004950 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004951 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004952 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4953 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4954 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004955 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004956
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004957 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004958 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4959
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004960 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004961 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004962 }
4963
4964 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004965 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004966 assert(DefaultValue &&
4967 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004968 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004969 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4970 if (!TableContents[I])
4971 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004972 }
4973
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004974 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004975 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004976 }
4977
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004978 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4979 // that single value.
4980 if (SingleValue) {
4981 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4982 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004983 }
4984
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004985 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4986 // table index.
4987 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4988 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4989 APInt PrevVal;
4990 APInt DistToPrev;
4991 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4992 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4993 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4994 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4995 if (!ConstVal) {
4996 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4997 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4998 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4999 break;
5000 }
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00005001 const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00005002 if (I != 0) {
5003 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
5004 if (I == 1) {
5005 DistToPrev = Dist;
5006 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
5007 LinearMappingPossible = false;
5008 break;
5009 }
5010 }
5011 PrevVal = Val;
5012 }
5013 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
5014 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
5015 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
5016 Kind = LinearMapKind;
5017 ++NumLinearMaps;
5018 return;
5019 }
5020 }
5021
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005022 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005023 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005024 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005025 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
5026 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
5027 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00005028 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
5029 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
5030 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
5031 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
5032 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005033 }
5034 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
5035 BitMapElementTy = IT;
5036 Kind = BitMapKind;
5037 ++NumBitMaps;
5038 return;
5039 }
5040
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005041 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005042 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005043 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
5044
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005045 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
5046 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005047 "switch.table." + FuncName);
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00005048 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
David Green2352b302018-09-12 09:54:17 +00005049 // Set the alignment to that of an array items. We will be only loading one
5050 // value out of it.
5051 Array->setAlignment(DL.getPrefTypeAlignment(ValueType));
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005052 Kind = ArrayKind;
5053}
5054
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005055Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005056 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005057 case SingleValueKind:
5058 return SingleValue;
5059 case LinearMapKind: {
5060 // Derive the result value from the input value.
5061 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
5062 false, "switch.idx.cast");
5063 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5064 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5065 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5066 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5067 return Result;
5068 }
5069 case BitMapKind: {
5070 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5071 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005072
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005073 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5074 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5075 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5076 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005077
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005078 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5079 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5080 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5081 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005082
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005083 // Shift down.
5084 Value *DownShifted =
5085 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5086 // Mask off.
5087 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5088 }
5089 case ArrayKind: {
5090 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5091 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5092 uint64_t TableSize =
5093 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5094 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5095 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5096 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5097 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005098
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005099 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5100 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5101 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
James Y Knight14359ef2019-02-01 20:44:24 +00005102 return Builder.CreateLoad(
5103 cast<ArrayType>(Array->getValueType())->getElementType(), GEP,
5104 "switch.load");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005105 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005106 }
5107 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5108}
5109
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005110bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005111 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005112 Type *ElementType) {
5113 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005114 if (!IT)
5115 return false;
5116 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5117 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005118
5119 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005120 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005121 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005122 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005123}
5124
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005125/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5126/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005127static bool
5128ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5129 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5130 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005131 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5132 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005133
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005134 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005135 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005136 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5137 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005138
5139 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005140 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005141
5142 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005143 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5144 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5145 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005146
5147 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5148 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5149 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5150 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005151 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005152 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005153
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005154 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5155 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5156 return true;
5157
5158 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5159 if (HasIllegalType)
5160 return false;
5161
5162 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5163 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5164 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5165 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005166}
5167
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005168/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5169/// \code
5170/// if (idx < tablesize)
5171/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5172/// else
5173/// r = default_value;
5174/// if (r != default_value)
5175/// ...
5176/// \endcode
5177/// Is optimized to:
5178/// \code
5179/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5180/// if (cond)
5181/// r = table[idx];
5182/// else
5183/// r = default_value;
5184/// if (cond)
5185/// ...
5186/// \endcode
5187/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005188static void reuseTableCompare(
5189 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5190 Constant *DefaultValue,
5191 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005192 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5193 if (!CmpInst)
5194 return;
5195
5196 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5197 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5198 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5199 return;
5200
5201 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5202 if (!CmpOp1)
5203 return;
5204
5205 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5206 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5207 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5208
5209 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5210 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5211 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5212 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5213 return;
5214
5215 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5216 // compare result.
5217 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5218 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005219 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Mikael Holmen0a3e9802017-12-05 14:14:00 +00005220 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst || isa<UndefValue>(CaseConst))
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005221 return;
5222 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5223 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5224 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005225
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005226 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5227 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5228 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5229 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5230 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5231 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5232 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5233 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5234 return;
5235 }
5236
5237 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5238 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5239 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5240 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5241 } else {
5242 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005243 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5244 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5245 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005246 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5247 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5248 }
5249}
5250
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005251/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5252/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5253/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005254static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5255 const DataLayout &DL,
5256 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005257 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005258
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005259 Function *Fn = SI->getParent()->getParent();
5260 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
5261 // attribute is not set.
5262 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
5263 (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsString() == "true"))
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005264 return false;
5265
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005266 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5267 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5268
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005269 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5270 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5271 // string and lookup indices into that.
5272
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005273 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005274 // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005275 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005276 return false;
5277
5278 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005279 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Matthias Braun9fd397b2018-10-31 00:23:23 +00005280 assert(!empty(SI->cases()));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005281 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005282 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5283 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005284
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005285 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005286
5287 using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005288 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005289
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005290 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5291 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5292 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005293
5294 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005295 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005296 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5297 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5298 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5299 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5300
5301 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005302 using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005303 ResultsTy Results;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005304 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005305 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005306 return false;
5307
5308 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005309 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5310 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5311 Constant *Value = I.second;
5312 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5313 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5314 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005315 }
5316 }
5317
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005318 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005319 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005320 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5321 }
5322
5323 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5324 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5325 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5326 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5327
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005328 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5329 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005330 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005331 bool HasDefaultResults =
5332 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5333 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005334
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005335 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5336 if (NeedMask) {
5337 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005338 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005339 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005340 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005341 return false;
5342 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005343
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005344 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5345 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5346 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005347 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005348 }
5349
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005350 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005351 return false;
5352
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005353 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005354 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005355 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5356 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005357
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005358 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005359 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Sanjay Patel73811a12017-09-20 22:31:35 +00005360 Value *TableIndex;
5361 if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
5362 TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
5363 else
5364 TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
5365 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005366
5367 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5368 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005369 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005370 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005371 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5372 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5373 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5374
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005375 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5376 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5377 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5378 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5379 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5380 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005381 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5382
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005383 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005384 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005385 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5386 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005387 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005388 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5389 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5390 RangeCheckBranch =
5391 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005392 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005393
5394 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5395 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005396
5397 if (NeedMask) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005398 // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
5399 // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005400 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5401 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005402 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5403 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005404
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005405 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005406 // unnecessary illegal types.
5407 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5408 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5409 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005410 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005411 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5412 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005413 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5414 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005415 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5416 }
5417 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5418
5419 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5420 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5421 // else continue with table lookup.
5422 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005423 Value *MaskIndex =
5424 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5425 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5426 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5427 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005428 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5429
5430 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5431 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5432 }
5433
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005434 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005435 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005436 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5437 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
Max Kazantsev20b91892019-02-12 07:09:29 +00005438 /*KeepOneInputPHIs=*/true);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005439 }
5440
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005441 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
George Burgess IVf9d26af2018-05-05 04:52:26 +00005442 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005443 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005444
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005445 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5446 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005447 StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005448 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
5449 FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005450
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005451 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005452
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005453 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5454 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005455 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5456 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005457 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5458 ReturnedEarly = true;
5459 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005460 }
5461
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005462 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5463 // possible.
5464 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5465 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5466 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5467 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5468 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5469 }
5470 }
5471
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005472 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005473 }
5474
5475 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5476 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5477
5478 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005479 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005480 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005481
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005482 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005483 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005484 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5485 }
5486 SI->eraseFromParent();
5487
5488 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005489 if (NeedMask)
5490 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005491 return true;
5492}
5493
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005494static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5495 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5496 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5497 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5498 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5499 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5500 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005501
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005502 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5503}
5504
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005505/// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5506/// of cases.
5507///
5508/// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5509/// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5510///
5511/// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5512/// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005513static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5514 const DataLayout &DL,
5515 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5516 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5517 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5518 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5519 return false;
5520 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5521 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5522 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5523 return false;
5524
5525 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5526 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5527 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5528 // as signed.
5529 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5530 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5531 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
Fangrui Song0cac7262018-09-27 02:13:45 +00005532 llvm::sort(Values);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005533
5534 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5535 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5536 return false;
5537
5538 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5539 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5540 for (auto &V : Values)
Vitaly Buka524c0a62017-10-17 18:33:15 +00005541 V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005542
5543 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5544 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5545 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5546 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5547 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005548 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005549
5550 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5551 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5552 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5553 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5554 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5555 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5556 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5557 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005558 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005559 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5560 return false;
5561
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005562 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005563 for (auto &V : Values)
5564 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5565
5566 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5567 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5568 return false;
5569
5570 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5571 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5572 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5573 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5574 //
5575 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5576 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5577 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5578 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005579
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005580 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5581 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5582 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5583 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005584 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5585 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5586 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005587 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5588
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005589 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5590 auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005591 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005592 Case.setValue(
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005593 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005594 }
5595 return true;
5596}
5597
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005598bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005599 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5600
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005601 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5602 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5603 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5604 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5605 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005606 return requestResimplify();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005607
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005608 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5609 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5610 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005611 return requestResimplify();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005612
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005613 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5614 // away into any preds.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005615 if (SI == &*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005616 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005617 return requestResimplify();
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005618 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005619
5620 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005621 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005622 return requestResimplify();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005623
5624 // Remove unreachable cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005625 if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, Options.AC, DL))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005626 return requestResimplify();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005627
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005628 if (switchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005629 return requestResimplify();
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005630
Sanjay Patelb80daf02017-10-22 19:10:07 +00005631 if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005632 return requestResimplify();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005633
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005634 // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
5635 // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
5636 // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
5637 // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
5638 // optimisation pipeline.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005639 if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
5640 SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005641 return requestResimplify();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005642
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005643 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005644 return requestResimplify();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005645
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005646 return false;
5647}
5648
5649bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5650 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5651 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005652
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005653 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5654 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5655 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5656 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005657 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005658 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5659 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005660 --i;
5661 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005662 Changed = true;
5663 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005664 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005665
5666 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5667 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5668 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005669 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005670 return true;
5671 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005672
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005673 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5674 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5675 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005676 EraseTerminatorAndDCECond(IBI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005677 return true;
5678 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005679
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005680 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5681 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005682 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005683 }
5684 return Changed;
5685}
5686
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005687/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5688/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5689/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5690/// a shared handler.
5691///
5692/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5693/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5694/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5695/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5696/// sinking in this file)
5697///
5698/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5699/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5700/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5701/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
Jesper Antonsson514b6b52018-06-28 10:55:04 +00005702/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't lose any ability to
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005703/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5704///
5705/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5706/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5707/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5708static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5709 BasicBlock *BB) {
5710 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5711 assert(Succ);
5712 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5713 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5714 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5715 return false;
5716
5717 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5718 if (BB == OtherPred)
5719 continue;
5720 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5721 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5722 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5723 continue;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005724 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5725 ;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005726 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5727 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5728 continue;
5729
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005730 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005731 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
Craig Topper61998282018-06-09 05:04:20 +00005732 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005733 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5734 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5735 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005736 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5737 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005738 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5739 }
5740
5741 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5742 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005743 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5744 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5745 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005746 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5747 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5748 }
5749
Craig Topper61998282018-06-09 05:04:20 +00005750 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005751 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5752 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5753 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5754 }
5755
5756 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5757 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5758 BI->eraseFromParent();
5759 return true;
5760 }
5761 return false;
5762}
5763
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005764bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5765 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005766 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005767 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005768
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005769 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005770 // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
5771 // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005772 // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
5773 // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005774 // Note that if BB has only one predecessor then we do not introduce new
5775 // backedge, so we can eliminate BB.
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005776 bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005777 Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
Vedant Kumar4de31bb2018-11-19 19:54:27 +00005778 (LoopHeaders && BB->hasNPredecessorsOrMore(2) &&
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005779 (LoopHeaders->count(BB) || LoopHeaders->count(Succ)));
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005780 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005781 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005782 !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005783 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005784
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005785 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
5786 // constant, try to simplify the block.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005787 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5788 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5789 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5790 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005791 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005792 tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005793 return true;
5794 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005795
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005796 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5797 // equivalent.
5798 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005799 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5800 ;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005801 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005802 return true;
5803 }
5804
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005805 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5806 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5807 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5808 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005809 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005810 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005811 return false;
5812}
5813
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005814static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5815 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5816 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5817 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5818 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5819 return nullptr;
5820 PredPred = PPred;
5821 }
5822 return PredPred;
5823}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005824
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005825bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005826 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00005827 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
5828 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
5829 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005830
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005831 // Conditional branch
5832 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5833 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5834 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5835 // switch.
5836 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005837 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005838 return requestResimplify();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005839
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005840 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5841 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005842 auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005843 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005844 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005845 return requestResimplify();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005846 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005847 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005848 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005849 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005850 }
5851 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005852
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005853 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005854 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005855 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005856
Sanjay Patel7d82d372018-12-02 13:26:03 +00005857 // If this basic block has dominating predecessor blocks and the dominating
5858 // blocks' conditions imply BI's condition, we know the direction of BI.
5859 Optional<bool> Imp = isImpliedByDomCondition(BI->getCondition(), BI, DL);
5860 if (Imp) {
5861 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5862 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5863 ConstantInt *TorF = *Imp ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5864 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5865 BI->setCondition(TorF);
5866 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
5867 return requestResimplify();
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005868 }
5869
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005870 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5871 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5872 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005873 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005874 return requestResimplify();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005875
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005876 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5877 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5878 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5879 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005880 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5881 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005882 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005883 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005884 } else {
5885 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005886 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005887 Instruction *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005888 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5889 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005890 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005891 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005892 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005893 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005894 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005895 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005896 Instruction *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005897 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5898 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005899 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005900 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005901 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005902
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005903 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5904 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5905 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5906 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005907 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, Options.AC))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005908 return requestResimplify();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005909
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005910 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005911 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5912 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005913 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005914 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005915 return requestResimplify();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005916
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005917 // Look for diamond patterns.
5918 if (MergeCondStores)
5919 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5920 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5921 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00005922 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00005923 return requestResimplify();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005924
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005925 return false;
5926}
5927
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005928/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5929static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5930 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5931 if (!C)
5932 return false;
5933
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005934 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005935 return false;
5936
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005937 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005938 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005939 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005940
5941 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5942 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005943 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5944 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5945 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5946 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005947 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005948 return false;
5949
5950 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5951 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5952 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5953 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5954
5955 // Look through bitcasts.
5956 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5957 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5958
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005959 // Load from null is undefined.
5960 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005961 if (!LI->isVolatile())
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005962 return !NullPointerIsDefined(LI->getFunction(),
5963 LI->getPointerAddressSpace());
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005964
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005965 // Store to null is undefined.
5966 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005967 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005968 return (!NullPointerIsDefined(SI->getFunction(),
5969 SI->getPointerAddressSpace())) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005970 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005971
5972 // A call to null is undefined.
5973 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005974 return !NullPointerIsDefined(CS->getFunction()) &&
5975 CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005976 }
5977 return false;
5978}
5979
5980/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005981/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005982static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005983 for (PHINode &PHI : BB->phis())
5984 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5985 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI.getIncomingValue(i), &PHI)) {
Chandler Carruthedb12a82018-10-15 10:04:59 +00005986 Instruction *T = PHI.getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005987 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5988 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005989 BB->removePredecessor(PHI.getIncomingBlock(i));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005990 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5991 // destination from conditional branches.
5992 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5993 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5994 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005995 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5996 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005997 BI->eraseFromParent();
5998 return true;
5999 }
6000 // TODO: SwitchInst.
6001 }
6002
6003 return false;
6004}
6005
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00006006bool SimplifyCFGOpt::simplifyOnce(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00006007 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006008
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00006009 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006010 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006011
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006012 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
6013 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006014 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006015 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00006016 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00006017 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
6018 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006019 }
6020
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006021 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
6022 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00006023 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006024
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00006025 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
6026 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
6027
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00006028 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
6029 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
6030
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006031 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
6032 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
6033 // if there are no PHI nodes.
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006034 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
6035 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00006036
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00006037 if (SinkCommon && Options.SinkCommonInsts)
6038 Changed |= SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BB);
6039
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00006040 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
6041
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006042 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
6043 // eliminate it, do so now.
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006044 if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006045 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00006046 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006047
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00006048 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006049 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006050 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006051 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
6052 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006053 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006054 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
6055 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006056 }
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006057 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006058 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
6059 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006060 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006061 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
6062 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006063 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006064 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
6065 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006066 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006067 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
6068 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006069 } else if (auto *UI = dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006070 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
6071 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006072 } else if (auto *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006073 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6074 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006075 }
6076
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006077 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006078}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006079
Craig Topper1d15f7b2018-10-04 21:11:52 +00006080bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
6081 bool Changed = false;
6082
6083 // Repeated simplify BB as long as resimplification is requested.
6084 do {
6085 Resimplify = false;
6086
6087 // Perform one round of simplifcation. Resimplify flag will be set if
6088 // another iteration is requested.
6089 Changed |= simplifyOnce(BB);
6090 } while (Resimplify);
6091
6092 return Changed;
6093}
6094
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006095bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
6096 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006097 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006098 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006099 Options)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006100 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006101}